1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
Order Today|Dealer-Direct Buy Prices|Delivered + Installed in 48 States

Buy Commercial Metal Buildings Delivered & Installed Starting From $26,485

Steel And Stud is your trusted commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor. Order pre-engineered metal buildings for business use in any width and length with pricing starting from $26,485 installed. Request metal building pricing, customize your steel building design, and schedule professional steel building installation across 48 states. Get a free quote, compare commercial building packages, or call 1-877-275-7048 to plan your project today.

$26,485
Starting From
100ft
Clear Span Width
20yr
12ga Frame Warranty
48
States Delivered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1521–1560 of 2740 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Muted charcoal prefab metal building yoga studio with monitor style windows and glass doors

12×12 Backyard Home Office

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Backyard Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Backyard Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Backyard Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Backyard Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of everyday backyard home office space. Remote workers convert a 12×12 steel building into an insulated home office for under $10K all-in. R-19 batts in the walls, double-bubble in the roof, a.

You’re viewing:Backyard Home Office·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • French Door
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-BACKYARD-HOME-OFBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 backyard home office.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. 12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of everyday backyard home office space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Backyard Home Office layout.

12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of everyday backyard home office space. Remote workers convert a 12×12 steel building into an insulated home office for under $10K all-in. R-19 batts in the walls, double-bubble in the roof, a mini-split, and one French door makes a quiet 144 sq ft workspace separated from the house. Run conduit before slab pour.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Home Office works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Backyard Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Home Office spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard home office
Everyday backyard home office
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard home office + seasonal storage
backyard home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Backyard Home Office, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 backyard home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Backyard Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Backyard Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Home Office also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 backyard home office cost?

A 12×12 backyard home office from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 backyard home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 backyard home office?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 backyard home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 backyard home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 backyard home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 backyard home office.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 backyard home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 backyard home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 backyard home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 backyard home office typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Muted charcoal prefab metal building yoga studio with monitor style windows and glass doors

12×12 Backyard Home Office

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red prefab metal building shed with ATV and yellow mower inside, rolling hills behind

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Zero-Turn Mower Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Built for homeowners with a John Deere or Cub Cadet zero-turn that’s outgrowing the.

You’re viewing:Zero-Turn Mower Garage·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×7 Roll-Up
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • Mower Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-ZERO-TURN-MOWER-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 zero-turn mower garage.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Looking for a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Zero-Turn Mower Garage layout.

Looking for a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Built for homeowners with a John Deere or Cub Cadet zero-turn that’s outgrowing the garage. A 12×12 or 12×12 roll-up door clears a riding mower with the deck on, and 144 sq ft leaves room for fuel cans, a trimmer, and a wall of pegboard. Order with a roll-up door pre-installed.

💡 Pro tip:Zero-Turn Mower Garage works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Zero-Turn Mower Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Zero-Turn Mower Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Zero-Turn Mower Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday zero-turn mower garage
Everyday zero-turn mower garage
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a zero-turn mower garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWzero-turn mower garage + seasonal storage
zero-turn mower garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 zero-turn mower garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Zero-Turn Mower Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Zero-Turn Mower Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Zero-Turn Mower Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Zero-Turn Mower Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage cost?

A 12×12 zero-turn mower garage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 zero-turn mower garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud zero-turn mower garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud zero-turn mower garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 zero-turn mower garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 zero-turn mower garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 zero-turn mower garage typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Zero-Turn Mower Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red prefab metal building shed with ATV and yellow mower inside, rolling hills behind

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black steel building backyard studio with lit windows, garage door and garden bench at dusk

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Garden Shed with Windows

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows, built for daily backyard use.

Our 12×12 garden shed with windows fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Gardeners spec this with two 12×12 windows and a 36-inch walk-in door for.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed with Windows·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • 2 Windows
  • Walk-In Door
  • Vented Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-GARDEN-SHED-WINDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 garden shed with windows.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Our 12×12 garden shed with windows fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft shop

Garden Shed with Windows layout.

Our 12×12 garden shed with windows fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Gardeners spec this with two 12×12 windows and a 36-inch walk-in door for potting, seed-starting, and tool storage. The vertical-panel walls handle splash from a hose-down without rotting, and the 10-foot width fits a potting bench plus floor-to-ceiling shelving on the opposite wall.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Shed with Windows works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Garden Shed with Windows in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed with Windows.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed with Windows spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed with Windows.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed with windows
Everyday garden shed with windows
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed with windows.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed with windows + seasonal storage
garden shed with windows + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 garden shed with windows is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed with Windows shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Garden Shed with Windows buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Garden Shed with Windows

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed with Windows · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed with Windows also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed with Windows questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 garden shed with windows cost?

A 12×12 garden shed with windows from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 garden shed with windows price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed with windows ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 garden shed with windows?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed with windows different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 garden shed with windows need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 garden shed with windows delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 garden shed with windows without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 garden shed with windows.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 garden shed with windows?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 garden shed with windows in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 garden shed with windows add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 garden shed with windows typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed with Windows quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black steel building backyard studio with lit windows, garage door and garden bench at dusk

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy blue prefab metal building gym beside a backyard pool at dusk with warm lighting

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Pool Equipment & Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana, built for hobby and recreational use.

12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of hobby-ready pool equipment & cabana space. Pool owners use 144 sq ft to house the pump, filter, heater, and chemicals on one side and changing-room storage on the other. Galvalume panels.

You’re viewing:Pool Equipment & Cabana·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Finish
  • Locking Door
  • Chemical-Safe
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-POOL-EQUIPMENT-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 pool equipment & cabana.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. 12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of hobby-ready pool equipment & cabana space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑12′ × 12′ · 144 ground + loft

Pool Equipment & Cabana layout.

12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of hobby-ready pool equipment & cabana space. Pool owners use 144 sq ft to house the pump, filter, heater, and chemicals on one side and changing-room storage on the other. Galvalume panels resist chlorine vapor better than wood, and a 36-inch walk-in door with a deadbolt locks up chemicals when kids are around.

💡 Pro tip:Pool Equipment & Cabana works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool Equipment & Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool Equipment & Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool Equipment & Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool equipment & cabana
Everyday pool equipment & cabana
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool equipment & cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool equipment & cabana + seasonal storage
pool equipment & cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 pool equipment & cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool Equipment & Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool Equipment & Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool Equipment & Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool Equipment & Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana cost?

A 12×12 pool equipment & cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 pool equipment & cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool equipment & cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool equipment & cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 pool equipment & cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 pool equipment & cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×12 pool equipment & cabana for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a pool equipment & cabana to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Pool Equipment & Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy blue prefab metal building gym beside a backyard pool at dusk with warm lighting

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal shed converted to backyard office studio with black trim and large windows

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Workshop & Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Our 12×12 workshop & hobby room fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists run a 10-foot workbench down the long wall, a 4-foot drill press.

You’re viewing:Workshop & Hobby Room·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
12×30
longer
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • 9′ Legs
  • 1 Window
  • 14 GA Tubular
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 workshop & hobby room.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Our 12×12 workshop & hobby room fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Workshop & Hobby Room layout.

Our 12×12 workshop & hobby room fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists run a 10-foot workbench down the long wall, a 4-foot drill press station on the short wall, and still walk a project around. 9-foot legs give clearance for wall-mounted lumber racks. Add a window over the bench for natural light and a 60-amp subpanel for tools.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop & Hobby Room works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop & Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop & Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop & Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop & hobby room
Everyday workshop & hobby room
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop & hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop & hobby room + seasonal storage
workshop & hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 workshop & hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop & Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop & Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop & Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop & Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 workshop & hobby room cost?

A 12×12 workshop & hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 workshop & hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop & hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 workshop & hobby room?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop & hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 workshop & hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 workshop & hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 workshop & hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 workshop & hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 workshop & hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 workshop & hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 workshop & hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 workshop & hobby room typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop & Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal shed converted to backyard office studio with black trim and large windows

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit gym with folding glass doors open to dumbbell rack and bench

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Bike & Sports Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 bike & sports storage packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Families with four-plus bikes, kayaks, and sports gear use a 12×12 utility shed to clear.

You’re viewing:Bike & Sports Storage·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Double Doors
  • Wall Hooks Ready
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-BIKE-SPORTS-STORBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 bike & sports storage.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 bike & sports storage packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft shop

Bike & Sports Storage layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 bike & sports storage packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Families with four-plus bikes, kayaks, and sports gear use a 12×12 utility shed to clear the garage. Wall-mounted vertical bike hooks fit eight bikes on one 12-foot wall. The 10-foot depth handles a 9-foot kayak diagonal-stored. A double-door front opening makes haul-in-haul-out painless.

💡 Pro tip:Bike & Sports Storage works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Bike & Sports Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Bike & Sports Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Bike & Sports Storage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Bike & Sports Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday bike & sports storage
Everyday bike & sports storage
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a bike & sports storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbike & sports storage + seasonal storage
bike & sports storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 bike & sports storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Bike & Sports Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Bike & Sports Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Bike & Sports Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Bike & Sports Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Bike & Sports Storage also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Bike & Sports Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 bike & sports storage cost?

A 12×12 bike & sports storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 bike & sports storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud bike & sports storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 bike & sports storage?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud bike & sports storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 bike & sports storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 bike & sports storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 bike & sports storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 bike & sports storage.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 bike & sports storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 bike & sports storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 bike & sports storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 bike & sports storage typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Bike & Sports Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit gym with folding glass doors open to dumbbell rack and bench

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open front in rocky mountain terrain

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter | Steel and Stud, From $2,800

12

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,200$2,800SAVE $400
or $58/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Chicken Coop Shelter

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 chicken coop shelter packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Small property owners convert a 12×12 metal building into a predator-proof coop for 15-20 hens. Steel.

You’re viewing:Chicken Coop Shelter·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,800$3,200Save $400
or as low as $58/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Vented Gables
  • Predator-Proof
  • Galvalume Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-CHICKEN-COOP-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 chicken coop shelter.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 chicken coop shelter packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Chicken Coop Shelter layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 chicken coop shelter packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Small property owners convert a 12×12 metal building into a predator-proof coop for 15-20 hens. Steel framing won’t be chewed by raccoons, and Galvalume walls hose-clean. Add a partial side opening for a covered run, vented gables for summer airflow, and a walk-in door for daily egg collection.

💡 Pro tip:Chicken Coop Shelter works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Chicken Coop Shelter.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Chicken Coop Shelter spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Chicken Coop Shelter.

DAILY USEEveryday chicken coop shelter
Everyday chicken coop shelter
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a chicken coop shelter.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchicken coop shelter + seasonal storage
chicken coop shelter + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$58/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 chicken coop shelter is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $58/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Chicken Coop Shelter shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Chicken Coop Shelter · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Chicken Coop Shelter also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Chicken Coop Shelter questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 chicken coop shelter cost?

A 12×12 chicken coop shelter from Steel and Stud starts at $2,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $58/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 chicken coop shelter price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud chicken coop shelter ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 chicken coop shelter?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud chicken coop shelter different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 chicken coop shelter need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 chicken coop shelter delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 chicken coop shelter without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $58/month on a 12×12 chicken coop shelter.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 chicken coop shelter?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 chicken coop shelter in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×12 chicken coop shelter stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Chicken Coop Shelter quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open front in rocky mountain terrain

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue prefab metal building with cream roll-up door and walk door in a flower garden

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed | Steel and Stud, From $2,800

12

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,200$2,800SAVE $400
or $58/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers store a sub-compact tractor with the bucket dropped, plus a tiller and brush.

You’re viewing:Garden Tractor & Implement Shed·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,800$3,200Save $400
or as low as $58/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 9′ Legs
  • Implement Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-GARDEN-TRACTOR-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft shop

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers store a sub-compact tractor with the bucket dropped, plus a tiller and brush hog. 9-foot legs and a 12×12 roll-up door clear the ROPS on most Kubota BX and John Deere 1-series tractors. The 12-foot depth fits the tractor with implements still attached.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Tractor & Implement Shed works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Tractor & Implement Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Tractor & Implement Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday garden tractor & implement shed
Everyday garden tractor & implement shed
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden tractor & implement shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden tractor & implement shed + seasonal storage
garden tractor & implement shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$58/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $58/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Tractor & Implement Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Tractor & Implement Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Tractor & Implement Shed also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed cost?

A 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed from Steel and Stud starts at $2,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $58/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden tractor & implement shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden tractor & implement shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $58/month on a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Tractor & Implement Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue prefab metal building with cream roll-up door and walk door in a flower garden

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building equipment shed with open white roll-up door and John Deere zero turn mower

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Riders fit two motorcycles plus gear on one half and a snowmobile or ATV on the.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Concrete Anchors
  • Locking Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-MOTORCYCLE-SNOWMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Looking for a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage layout.

Looking for a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Riders fit two motorcycles plus gear on one half and a snowmobile or ATV on the other. The 12-foot depth clears a full-dress touring bike with saddlebags. Specify a concrete slab and add a heavy-duty padlocked roll-up. Steel and Stud welds the frame to skip the chain-link feel of a kit.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & snowmobile storage
Everyday motorcycle & snowmobile storage
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & snowmobile storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & snowmobile storage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & snowmobile storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage cost?

A 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & snowmobile storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & snowmobile storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle & snowmobile storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building equipment shed with open white roll-up door and John Deere zero turn mower

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Backyard prefab metal building gym in coastal teal with double barn doors and treadmill

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Generator & Utility Enclosure

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 generator & utility enclosure packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with whole-house generators, well pumps, and battery storage centralize.

You’re viewing:Generator & Utility Enclosure·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Louvered Vents
  • NEC Clearance
  • Vented Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-GENERATOR-UTILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 generator & utility enclosure.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 generator & utility enclosure packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Generator & Utility Enclosure layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 generator & utility enclosure packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with whole-house generators, well pumps, and battery storage centralize utilities in a 12×12 utility shed. Vented gables handle generator exhaust airflow, and the steel frame meets NEC clearance requirements better than a plastic enclosure. Add a walk-in door with louvered intake.

💡 Pro tip:Generator & Utility Enclosure works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Generator & Utility Enclosure.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Generator & Utility Enclosure spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Generator & Utility Enclosure.

DAILY USEEveryday generator & utility enclosure
Everyday generator & utility enclosure
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a generator & utility enclosure.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgenerator & utility enclosure + seasonal storage
generator & utility enclosure + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 generator & utility enclosure is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Generator & Utility Enclosure shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Generator & Utility Enclosure · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Generator & Utility Enclosure also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Generator & Utility Enclosure questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure cost?

A 12×12 generator & utility enclosure from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 generator & utility enclosure price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud generator & utility enclosure ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud generator & utility enclosure different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 generator & utility enclosure?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 generator & utility enclosure in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 generator & utility enclosure typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Generator & Utility Enclosure quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Backyard prefab metal building gym in coastal teal with double barn doors and treadmill

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black metal building with lit windows and garage door beside a lake at dusk

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12She-Shed / Studio Retreat

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. A 144 sq ft studio for art, yoga, reading, or escape from the kids. Spec it with two.

You’re viewing:She-Shed / Studio Retreat·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • French Door
  • 2 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-SHE-SHED-STUDIO-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Looking for a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑12′ × 12′ · 144 ground + loft

She-Shed / Studio Retreat layout.

Looking for a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. A 144 sq ft studio for art, yoga, reading, or escape from the kids. Spec it with two windows, a French door, wainscoting in a contrasting color, and full insulation. The 10-foot ceiling-to-wall feel is open enough that 144 sq ft reads as a real room, not a closet.

💡 Pro tip:She-Shed / Studio Retreat works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She-Shed / Studio Retreat.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She-Shed / Studio Retreat spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She-Shed / Studio Retreat.

DAILY USEEveryday she-shed / studio retreat
Everyday she-shed / studio retreat
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she-shed / studio retreat.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe-shed / studio retreat + seasonal storage
she-shed / studio retreat + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She-Shed / Studio Retreat shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She-Shed / Studio Retreat · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She-Shed / Studio Retreat also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She-Shed / Studio Retreat questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat cost?

A 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she-shed / studio retreat ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she-shed / studio retreat different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a she-shed / studio retreat to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your She-Shed / Studio Retreat quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black metal building with lit windows and garage door beside a lake at dusk

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with drive-through bay sheltering a John Deere tractor on a farm

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Single-Vehicle Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×20 single-vehicle carport packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners shopping a 12×20 metal carport want covered parking without the cost of full.

You’re viewing:Single-Vehicle Carport·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-SINGLE-VEHICLE-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 single-vehicle carport.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×20 single-vehicle carport packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Single-Vehicle Carport layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×20 single-vehicle carport packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners shopping a 12×20 metal carport want covered parking without the cost of full enclosure. The footprint clears a Silverado, F-150, or Ram with cab room, and the 9′ leg height handles a roof rack or kayak load. Most buyers add a single closed end for wind protection on the prevailing side.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Vehicle Carport works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Vehicle Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Vehicle Carport spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Vehicle Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday single-vehicle carport
Everyday single-vehicle carport
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-vehicle carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-vehicle carport + seasonal storage
single-vehicle carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 single-vehicle carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Vehicle Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Vehicle Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Vehicle Carport also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Vehicle Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 single-vehicle carport cost?

A 12×20 single-vehicle carport from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 single-vehicle carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-vehicle carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 single-vehicle carport?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-vehicle carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 single-vehicle carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 single-vehicle carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 single-vehicle carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 single-vehicle carport.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 single-vehicle carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 single-vehicle carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 single-vehicle carport add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 single-vehicle carport typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Vehicle Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with drive-through bay sheltering a John Deere tractor on a farm

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel garage with open white roll-up door beside a mountain lake

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Enclosed Metal Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage, built for daily backyard use.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday enclosed metal garage space. A 12×20 metal garage gives you a lockable, weatherproof bay for a daily-driver sedan, a project car, or a motorcycle collection. Roll-up door on the.

You’re viewing:Enclosed Metal Garage·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • 36″ Walk-In
  • Insulation Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-ENCLOSED-METAL-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 enclosed metal garage.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. 12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday enclosed metal garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Enclosed Metal Garage layout.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday enclosed metal garage space. A 12×20 metal garage gives you a lockable, weatherproof bay for a daily-driver sedan, a project car, or a motorcycle collection. Roll-up door on the gable end, walk-in door on the side, and you’ve got a workshop you can heat in winter. Popular with hobbyists who’d outgrown a 12×20 shed.

💡 Pro tip:Enclosed Metal Garage works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Enclosed Metal Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Enclosed Metal Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Enclosed Metal Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday enclosed metal garage
Everyday enclosed metal garage
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a enclosed metal garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWenclosed metal garage + seasonal storage
enclosed metal garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 enclosed metal garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Enclosed Metal Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Enclosed Metal Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Enclosed Metal Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Enclosed Metal Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 enclosed metal garage cost?

A 12×20 enclosed metal garage from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 enclosed metal garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud enclosed metal garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 enclosed metal garage?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud enclosed metal garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 enclosed metal garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 enclosed metal garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 enclosed metal garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 enclosed metal garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 enclosed metal garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 enclosed metal garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 enclosed metal garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 enclosed metal garage typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Enclosed Metal Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel garage with open white roll-up door beside a mountain lake

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed gym with open door, brown trim, and transom windows beside a wood deck

12×20 Metal Storage Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Metal Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Metal Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Metal Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Metal Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×20 metal storage shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. The 12×20 metal shed swallows lawn tractors, snow blowers, push mowers, ladders, and the.

You’re viewing:Metal Storage Shed·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×7 Roll-Up
  • Walk-In Door
  • 20-Yr Warranty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-METAL-STORAGE-SHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 metal storage shed.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 12×20 metal storage shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft shop

Metal Storage Shed layout.

Looking for a 12×20 metal storage shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. The 12×20 metal shed swallows lawn tractors, snow blowers, push mowers, ladders, and the seasonal yard chemicals most homeowners would rather not store in the basement. Add a roll-up door for tractor access plus a walk-in for daily entry. Beats a wood shed on lifespan by decades.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Storage Shed works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Metal Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday metal storage shed
Everyday metal storage shed
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal storage shed + seasonal storage
metal storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Metal Storage Shed, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 metal storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Metal Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Metal Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 metal storage shed cost?

A 12×20 metal storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 metal storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 metal storage shed?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 metal storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 metal storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 metal storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 metal storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 metal storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 metal storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 metal storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 metal storage shed typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed gym with open door, brown trim, and transom windows beside a wood deck

12×20 Metal Storage Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with green wainscoting, green roll-up door and white entry

12×20 Backyard Workshop

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Backyard Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Backyard Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

A 240 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter station, and deeper storage along the back wall. Insulation-ready frame keeps the space comfortable for evening woodworking or.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
14×20
wider
$4,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • From $5,395
  • Wired Ready
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 backyard workshop.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. A 240 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter station, and deeper storage along the back wall.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Backyard Workshop layout.

A 240 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter station, and deeper storage along the back wall. Insulation-ready frame keeps the space comfortable for evening woodworking or tinkering year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Backyard Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop
Everyday backyard workshop
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop + seasonal storage
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Backyard Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Backyard Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 backyard workshop cost?

A 12×20 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 backyard workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 backyard workshop?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 backyard workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 backyard workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 backyard workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 backyard workshop.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 backyard workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 backyard workshop typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with green wainscoting, green roll-up door and white entry

12×20 Backyard Workshop

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal shed storage interior with wire shelving, bins, hanging bikes, and riding mower entering

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Motorcycle & ATV Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of hobby-ready motorcycle & atv storage space. Riders use the 12×20 footprint to park three to four motorcycles or a pair of ATVs side-by-side with a workbench at the back. Gardeners and small.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & ATV Storage·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Hurricane Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. 12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of hobby-ready motorcycle & atv storage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Motorcycle & ATV Storage layout.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of hobby-ready motorcycle & atv storage space. Riders use the 12×20 footprint to park three to four motorcycles or a pair of ATVs side-by-side with a workbench at the back. Gardeners and small property owners add a 12×20 roll-up so a quad or a side-by-side rolls straight in. Lockable, dry, and cheaper over five years than self-storage.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & ATV Storage works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & ATV Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & ATV Storage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & ATV Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & atv storage
Everyday motorcycle & atv storage
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & atv storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & atv storage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & atv storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & ATV Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & ATV Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & ATV Storage also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & ATV Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage cost?

A 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×20 motorcycle & atv storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle & atv storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & ATV Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal shed storage interior with wire shelving, bins, hanging bikes, and riding mower entering

12×20 Motorcycle & ATV Storage

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open equipment shed steel structure sheltering a green tractor, baler, and red plow

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed | Steel and Stud, From $4,200

12

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,800$4,200SAVE $600
or $88/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Equipment & Hay Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 12×20 equipment & hay shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-acreage owners stash a compact tractor, a brush hog implement, and a few rolls of hay under.

You’re viewing:Equipment & Hay Shed·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,200$4,800Save $600
or as low as $88/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$4,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Open Gable Option
  • Snow Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-EQUIPMENT-HAY-SHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 equipment & hay shed.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 12×20 equipment & hay shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Equipment & Hay Shed layout.

Looking for a 12×20 equipment & hay shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-acreage owners stash a compact tractor, a brush hog implement, and a few rolls of hay under a 12×20 metal barn. Twelve-foot legs clear a tractor with a ROPS up. Open one gable end for drive-through or close it for full weatherproofing, both ship in the same kit.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment & Hay Shed works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Shed spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay shed
Everyday equipment & hay shed
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay shed + seasonal storage
equipment & hay shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$88/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 equipment & hay shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $88/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Shed also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 equipment & hay shed cost?

A 12×20 equipment & hay shed from Steel and Stud starts at $4,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $88/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 equipment & hay shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & hay shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 equipment & hay shed?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 equipment & hay shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 equipment & hay shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 equipment & hay shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $88/month on a 12×20 equipment & hay shed.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 equipment & hay shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 equipment & hay shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×20 equipment & hay shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open equipment shed steel structure sheltering a green tractor, baler, and red plow

12×20 Equipment & Hay Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

12×20 Pool House / Cabana

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Pool House / Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Pool House / Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Pool House / Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Pool House / Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday pool house / cabana space. Pool owners spec a 12×20 steel building as a changing room, towel storage, and pump-equipment housing in one. Wainscoting in a contrasting color reads.

You’re viewing:Pool House / Cabana·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
12×30
longer
$5,300
14×20
wider
$4,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • French Door
  • Wainscoting
  • 17 Colors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 pool house / cabana.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. 12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday pool house / cabana space.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft ADU

Pool House / Cabana layout.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday pool house / cabana space. Pool owners spec a 12×20 steel building as a changing room, towel storage, and pump-equipment housing in one. Wainscoting in a contrasting color reads residential, and a French door plus two windows opens it to the deck. Insulated walls keep chlorine smells out of the pumps.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House / Cabana works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Pool House / Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House / Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House / Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House / Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house / cabana
Everyday pool house / cabana
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house / cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house / cabana + seasonal storage
pool house / cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Pool House / Cabana, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 pool house / cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House / Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Pool House / Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Pool House / Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House / Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House / Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House / Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 pool house / cabana cost?

A 12×20 pool house / cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 pool house / cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house / cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 pool house / cabana?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house / cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 pool house / cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 pool house / cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 pool house / cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 pool house / cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 pool house / cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 pool house / cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 pool house / cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 pool house / cabana typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House / Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

12×20 Pool House / Cabana

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

12×20 Home Office / Studio

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Home Office / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Home Office / Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Home Office / Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Home Office / Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×20 home office / studio? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. A detached home office on a 12×20 footprint costs less than a basement renovation and.

You’re viewing:Home Office / Studio·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
14×20
wider
$4,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Interior Partition
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-HOME-OFFICE-STUDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 home office / studio.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 12×20 home office / studio? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Home Office / Studio layout.

Looking for a 12×20 home office / studio? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. A detached home office on a 12×20 footprint costs less than a basement renovation and permits as an accessory structure in most counties, spec R-19 fiberglass batt, a mini-split, and a partition wall to split it into a focus room and a meeting nook. Three 12×20 windows bring in daylight without blowing the energy budget.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office / Studio works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Home Office / Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office / Studio spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office / Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office / studio
Everyday home office / studio
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office / studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office / studio + seasonal storage
home office / studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Home Office / Studio, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 home office / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Home Office / Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Home Office / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office / Studio also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office / Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 home office / studio cost?

A 12×20 home office / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 home office / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 home office / studio?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office / studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 home office / studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 home office / studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 home office / studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 home office / studio.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 home office / studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 home office / studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 home office / studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 home office / studio typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

12×20 Home Office / Studio

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure potting shed with copper colored roof and open french doors in a garden

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex | Steel and Stud, From $4,200

12

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,800$4,200SAVE $600
or $88/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Garden & Greenhouse Annex

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Gardeners pair a 12×20 utility shed with a lean-to for potting and seed-starting. Galvalume.

You’re viewing:Garden & Greenhouse Annex·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,200$4,800Save $600
or as low as $88/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$4,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume
  • Skylights
  • Lean-To Add
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-GARDEN-GREENHOUSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft shop

Garden & Greenhouse Annex layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Gardeners pair a 12×20 utility shed with a lean-to for potting and seed-starting. Galvalume bare-metal finish keeps cost down, and a row of skylights brings in light without the cost of a full polycarbonate greenhouse. Wide doors clear a wheelbarrow and a small tiller.

💡 Pro tip:Garden & Greenhouse Annex works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden & Greenhouse Annex.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden & Greenhouse Annex spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden & Greenhouse Annex.

DAILY USEEveryday garden & greenhouse annex
Everyday garden & greenhouse annex
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden & greenhouse annex.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden & greenhouse annex + seasonal storage
garden & greenhouse annex + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$88/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $88/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden & Greenhouse Annex shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden & Greenhouse Annex · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden & Greenhouse Annex also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden & Greenhouse Annex questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex cost?

A 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex from Steel and Stud starts at $4,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $88/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden & greenhouse annex ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden & greenhouse annex different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $88/month on a 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×20 garden & greenhouse annex stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Garden & Greenhouse Annex quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure potting shed with copper colored roof and open french doors in a garden

12×20 Garden & Greenhouse Annex

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit with green trim, single slope roof and SUV in lit studio bay

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site | Steel and Stud, From $5,400

12

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,150$5,400SAVE $750
or $113/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Mobile Office / Job Site

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site, engineered for code-compliant business use.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of code-compliant mobile office / job site space. Contractors and small property owners use a 12×20 building as a job-trailer alternative, locked tool storage on one end, plan table and laptop.

You’re viewing:Mobile Office / Job Site·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,400$6,150Save $750
or as low as $113/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$5,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • Double Doors
  • Smart Lock
  • Permit Drawings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-MOBILE-OFFICE-JOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 mobile office / job site.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. 12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of code-compliant mobile office / job site space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Mobile Office / Job Site layout.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of code-compliant mobile office / job site space. Contractors and small property owners use a 12×20 building as a job-trailer alternative, locked tool storage on one end, plan table and laptop bench on the other. Double doors on a gable end let you load palletized material; a smart lock handles after-hours pickups by the crew.

💡 Pro tip:Mobile Office / Job Site works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mobile Office / Job Site.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mobile Office / Job Site spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mobile Office / Job Site.

DAILY USEEveryday mobile office / job site
Everyday mobile office / job site
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mobile office / job site.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmobile office / job site + seasonal storage
mobile office / job site + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$113/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 mobile office / job site is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $113/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mobile Office / Job Site shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mobile Office / Job Site · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mobile Office / Job Site also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mobile Office / Job Site questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 mobile office / job site cost?

A 12×20 mobile office / job site from Steel and Stud starts at $5,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $113/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 mobile office / job site price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mobile office / job site ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 mobile office / job site?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mobile office / job site different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 mobile office / job site need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 mobile office / job site delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 mobile office / job site without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $113/month on a 12×20 mobile office / job site.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 mobile office / job site?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 mobile office / job site in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 12×20 mobile office / job site meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mobile Office / Job Site quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit with green trim, single slope roof and SUV in lit studio bay

12×20 Mobile Office / Job Site

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Slate blue commercial metal building with hip roof, window awnings, and glass entry doors

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Hobby Room / She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 12×20 hobby room / she shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Hobbyists carve out a 12×20 hobby room for quilting, pottery, painting, or model railroading.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room / She Shed·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • 30×30 Windows
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-HOBBY-ROOM-SHE-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 hobby room / she shed.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 12×20 hobby room / she shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑12′ × 20′ · 240 ground + loft

Hobby Room / She Shed layout.

Looking for a 12×20 hobby room / she shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Hobbyists carve out a 12×20 hobby room for quilting, pottery, painting, or model railroading, anything that needs uninterrupted floor space and decent light. Two-tone wainscoting, a pair of 12×20 windows, and a 36" walk-in keep it residential-looking from the patio.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room / She Shed works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room / She Shed spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room / she shed
Everyday hobby room / she shed
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room / she shed + seasonal storage
hobby room / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 hobby room / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 hobby room / she shed cost?

A 12×20 hobby room / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 hobby room / she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 hobby room / she shed?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 hobby room / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 hobby room / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 hobby room / she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 hobby room / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 hobby room / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 hobby room / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×20 hobby room / she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby room / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Slate blue commercial metal building with hip roof, window awnings, and glass entry doors

12×20 Hobby Room / She Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Single slope rv metal cover in espresso bronze with motorhome parked on a gravel pad

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact) | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact), built for daily backyard use.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday rv & boat cover (compact) space. Small property owners with a fishing boat on a single-axle trailer or a Class-B camper van use the 12×20 carport metal cover for UV and hail.

You’re viewing:RV & Boat Cover (Compact)·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Open Gables
  • Hail Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-RV-BOAT-COVER-COBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact).

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. 12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday rv & boat cover (compact) space.

RV BAYDaily Driver12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft · tall walls

RV & Boat Cover (Compact) layout.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday rv & boat cover (compact) space. Small property owners with a fishing boat on a single-axle trailer or a Class-B camper van use the 12×20 carport metal cover for UV and hail protection. Twelve-foot legs clear most pop-tops; open both gable ends so you back in and pull out without cranking the wheel.

💡 Pro tip:RV & Boat Cover (Compact) works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Boat Cover (Compact).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Boat Cover (Compact) spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Boat Cover (Compact).

DAILY USEEveryday rv & boat cover (compact)
Everyday rv & boat cover (compact)
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & boat cover (compact).
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & boat cover (compact) + seasonal storage
rv & boat cover (compact) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact), what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Boat Cover (Compact) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Boat Cover (Compact) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Boat Cover (Compact) also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Boat Cover (Compact) questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) cost?

A 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & boat cover (compact) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact)?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & boat cover (compact) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact).

What warranty comes with the 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Boat Cover (Compact) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Single slope rv metal cover in espresso bronze with motorhome parked on a gravel pad

12×20 RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building workshop at dusk with open roll-up bay and lit interior workbenches

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), built for daily backyard use.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space. Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 12×32 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool.

You’re viewing:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-METAL-GARAGE-ONEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop) space. Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 12×32 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool chest, and pegboard wall. A full-size F-150 (19’6") fits with 10+ feet of clear bench space behind the bumper.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

DAILY USEEveryday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
Everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal garage (one-car + workshop).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
metal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) cost?

A 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

What warranty comes with the 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building workshop at dusk with open roll-up bay and lit interior workbenches

12×32 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with wood posts on a fenced grassy pasture

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Carport for Truck + Trailer

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility.

You’re viewing:Carport for Truck + Trailer·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 140 MPH Rated
  • Open Sides
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-CARPORT-TRUCK-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 carport for truck + trailer.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Carport for Truck + Trailer layout.

Looking for a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end. Small property owners use this when a 12×32 carport leaves the trailer tongue exposed. Vertical roof sheds rain off both sides without gutter overflow.

💡 Pro tip:Carport for Truck + Trailer works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport for Truck + Trailer.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport for Truck + Trailer spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport for Truck + Trailer.

DAILY USEEveryday carport for truck + trailer
Everyday carport for truck + trailer
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport for truck + trailer.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
carport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 carport for truck + trailer is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport for Truck + Trailer shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport for Truck + Trailer · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport for Truck + Trailer also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport for Truck + Trailer questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer cost?

A 12×32 carport for truck + trailer from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 carport for truck + trailer price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 carport for truck + trailer?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 carport for truck + trailer in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 carport for truck + trailer add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 carport for truck + trailer typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport for Truck + Trailer quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with wood posts on a fenced grassy pasture

12×32 Carport for Truck + Trailer

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel barn with cupola weathervane and sliding doors on an autumn lakeside lawn

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Boat & RV Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover, built for hobby and recreational use.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of hobby-ready boat & rv storage cover space. Hobbyists with a 24′-26′ bass boat on a tandem-axle trailer fit it under a 12×32 canopy with the outboard cleared. Class-B vans and small Class-C.

You’re viewing:Boat & RV Storage Cover·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Vertical
  • 12′ Leg Height
  • UV-Resistant Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-BOAT-RV-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 boat & rv storage cover.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of hobby-ready boat & rv storage cover space.

RV BAYDaily Driver12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft · tall walls

Boat & RV Storage Cover layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of hobby-ready boat & rv storage cover space. Hobbyists with a 24′-26′ bass boat on a tandem-axle trailer fit it under a 12×32 canopy with the outboard cleared. Class-B vans and small Class-C RVs (under 28′) also tuck inside at 12-14′ leg height. Saves $1,200+ a year over commercial storage lots.

💡 Pro tip:Boat & RV Storage Cover works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & RV Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & RV Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & RV Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & rv storage cover
Everyday boat & rv storage cover
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & rv storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & rv storage cover + seasonal storage
boat & rv storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 boat & rv storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & RV Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & RV Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & RV Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & RV Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover cost?

A 12×32 boat & rv storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 boat & rv storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat & rv storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & rv storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 boat & rv storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 boat & rv storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 boat & rv storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×32 boat & rv storage cover for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & rv storage cover to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & RV Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel barn with cupola weathervane and sliding doors on an autumn lakeside lawn

12×32 Boat & RV Storage Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building man cave with open French doors revealing a furnished lounge at dusk

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard)

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard) | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Storage Building (Backyard)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard), built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×32 storage building (backyard)? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement.

You’re viewing:Storage Building (Backyard)·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Walk-In Door
  • R-13 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 storage building (backyard).

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 12×32 storage building (backyard)? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft shop

Storage Building (Backyard) layout.

Looking for a 12×32 storage building (backyard)? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement. Holds two riding mowers, a snowblower, kayaks on a wall rack, and seasonal bins on shelving. Single 12×32 roll-up plus a 36" walk-in door makes daily access easy.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building (Backyard) works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Storage Building (Backyard) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building (Backyard).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building (Backyard) spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building (Backyard).

DAILY USEEveryday storage building (backyard)
Everyday storage building (backyard)
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building (backyard).
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
storage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard), what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 storage building (backyard) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building (Backyard) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Storage Building (Backyard) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Storage Building (Backyard)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building (Backyard) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building (Backyard) also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building (Backyard) questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 storage building (backyard) cost?

A 12×32 storage building (backyard) from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 storage building (backyard) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 storage building (backyard)?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 storage building (backyard) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 storage building (backyard) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 storage building (backyard) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 storage building (backyard).

What warranty comes with the 12×32 storage building (backyard)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 storage building (backyard) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 storage building (backyard) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 storage building (backyard) typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building (Backyard) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building man cave with open French doors revealing a furnished lounge at dusk

12×32 Storage Building (Backyard)

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green prefab metal building cottage shed with white doors surrounded by flower gardens

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, built for daily backyard use.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout.

You’re viewing:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • Galvalume Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-LAWN-GARDEN-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft shop

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of everyday lawn & garden equipment cover space. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over. Gardeners running a small property use the long 30-foot wall for double sliding barn doors so a sub-compact tractor can drive straight in. Galvalume trim shrugs off fertilizer and irrigation overspray.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn & garden equipment cover
Everyday lawn & garden equipment cover
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn & garden equipment cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
lawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover cost?

A 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green prefab metal building cottage shed with white doors surrounded by flower gardens

12×32 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Muted charcoal prefab metal building yoga studio with monitor style windows and glass doors

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Workshop / Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×32.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Room·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows Std
  • Insulated Walk-In
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 workshop / hobby room.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Workshop / Hobby Room layout.

Looking for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×32 enclosed for a dedicated 384 sq ft workspace. Insulated walls plus a mini-split keep it usable year-round. Two 12×32 windows on the long wall pull in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop / Hobby Room works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby room
Everyday workshop / hobby room
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 workshop / hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 workshop / hobby room cost?

A 12×32 workshop / hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 workshop / hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 workshop / hobby room?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 workshop / hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 workshop / hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 workshop / hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 workshop / hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 workshop / hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 workshop / hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 workshop / hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 workshop / hobby room typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Muted charcoal prefab metal building yoga studio with monitor style windows and glass doors

12×32 Workshop / Hobby Room

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Home Office / Backyard Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready.

You’re viewing:Home Office / Backyard Studio·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Package
  • HOA-Friendly Colors
  • French Door Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-HOME-OFFICE-BACKBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 home office / backyard studio.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Home Office / Backyard Studio layout.

Looking for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio? At 384 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door. 384 sq ft fits a desk zone, lounge corner, and a small kitchenette wall. Add wainscoting and Pewter Gray walls for residential curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office / Backyard Studio works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office / Backyard Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office / Backyard Studio spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office / Backyard Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office / backyard studio
Everyday home office / backyard studio
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office / backyard studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
home office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 home office / backyard studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office / Backyard Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office / Backyard Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office / Backyard Studio also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office / Backyard Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 home office / backyard studio cost?

A 12×32 home office / backyard studio from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 home office / backyard studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 home office / backyard studio?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 home office / backyard studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 home office / backyard studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 home office / backyard studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 home office / backyard studio.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 home office / backyard studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 home office / backyard studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 home office / backyard studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 home office / backyard studio typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office / Backyard Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

12×32 Home Office / Backyard Studio

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel barn with white sliding doors and round hay bales stacked beside it

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $6,300

12

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,200$6,300SAVE $900
or $131/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Hay & Feed Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, built for farm and ranch demands.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×32 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side.

You’re viewing:Hay & Feed Storage Cover·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,300$7,200Save $900
or as low as $131/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,950
12×32
this size
$6,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • 65 PSF Snow
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 hay & feed storage cover.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Hay & Feed Storage Cover layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage cover space. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×32 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side open lets you back a flatbed straight up. Vertical roof prevents water pooling on long runs.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Feed Storage Cover works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Feed Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & feed storage cover
Everyday hay & feed storage cover
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
hay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$131/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 hay & feed storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $131/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Feed Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Feed Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Feed Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Feed Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover cost?

A 12×32 hay & feed storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $6,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $131/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $131/month on a 12×32 hay & feed storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×32 hay & feed storage cover stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Feed Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel barn with white sliding doors and round hay bales stacked beside it

12×32 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all.

You’re viewing:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Mud-Friendly Galvalume
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-ATV-SIDE-BY-SIDEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 384 sq ft. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural hobbyists.

💡 Pro tip:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv & side-by-side garage
Everyday atv & side-by-side garage
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv & side-by-side garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
atv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV & Side-by-Side Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV & Side-by-Side Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage cost?

A 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×32 atv & side-by-side garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv & side-by-side garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

12×32 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

12×32 Pool House / Cabana

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Pool House / Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Pool House / Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Pool House / Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Pool House / Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 pool house / cabana packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×32 as a pool house with a covered changing room.

You’re viewing:Pool House / Cabana·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Custom Color Match
  • French Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 pool house / cabana.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 pool house / cabana packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft ADU

Pool House / Cabana layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 pool house / cabana packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×32 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone. Split it 12×32 enclosed plus a 12×32 open-side cover, same building, two functions.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House / Cabana works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Pool House / Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House / Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House / Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House / Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house / cabana
Everyday pool house / cabana
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house / cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house / cabana + seasonal storage
pool house / cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Pool House / Cabana, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 pool house / cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House / Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Pool House / Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Pool House / Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House / Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House / Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House / Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 pool house / cabana cost?

A 12×32 pool house / cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 pool house / cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house / cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 pool house / cabana?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house / cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 pool house / cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 pool house / cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 pool house / cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 pool house / cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 pool house / cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 pool house / cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 pool house / cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 pool house / cabana typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House / Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

12×32 Pool House / Cabana

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Equipment shed interior of a steel structure with John Deere compact tractor and tool storage

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors | Steel and Stud, From $5,650

12

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,450$5,650SAVE $800
or $118/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Tool Shed for Contractors

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 tool shed for contractors packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed for Contractors·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,650$6,450Save $800
or as low as $118/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,300
12×32
this size
$5,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Deadbolt + Wi-Fi
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-TOOL-SHED-CONTRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 tool shed for contractors.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 tool shed for contractors packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft

Tool Shed for Contractors layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×32 tool shed for contractors packs 384 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes. The 12×32 roll-up swallows a full sheet of plywood flat. Slide bolt plus deadbolt plus Wi-Fi opener keeps it secure overnight.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed for Contractors works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed for Contractors.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed for Contractors spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed for Contractors.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed for contractors
Everyday tool shed for contractors
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed for contractors.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
tool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$118/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 tool shed for contractors is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $118/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed for Contractors shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed for Contractors · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed for Contractors also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🌾 12×32

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×32 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed for Contractors questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 tool shed for contractors cost?

A 12×32 tool shed for contractors from Steel and Stud starts at $5,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $118/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 tool shed for contractors price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 tool shed for contractors?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 tool shed for contractors need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 tool shed for contractors delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 tool shed for contractors without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $118/month on a 12×32 tool shed for contractors.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 tool shed for contractors?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 tool shed for contractors in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×32 tool shed for contractors add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×32 tool shed for contractors typically adds $3,072–$4,608 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed for Contractors quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Equipment shed interior of a steel structure with John Deere compact tractor and tool storage

12×32 Tool Shed for Contractors

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel carport jet ski cover attached to yellow shed roof building near marina sailboats

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $6,300

12

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,200$6,300SAVE $900
or $131/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×32Tractor & Implement Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

You’re viewing:Tractor & Implement Lean-To·Size12×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,300$7,200Save $900
or as low as $131/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×32
12×30
smaller
$5,950
12×32
this size
$6,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 384 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Config
  • Attaches To Existing
  • Open Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X32-TRACTOR-IMPLEMENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to.

12 feet wide × 32 feet long. 12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 32′ · 384 sq ft shop

Tractor & Implement Lean-To layout.

12×32 delivers 384 sq ft of rugged tractor & implement lean-to space. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor & Implement Lean-To works well at 12×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
384 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor & Implement Lean-To spec sheet.

Width12′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space384 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor & implement lean-to
Everyday tractor & implement lean-to
384 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor & implement lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
tractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, what makes it different.

384sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$131/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $131/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×32?

384 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 32′ footprint with 384 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,072–$4,608 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor & Implement Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor & Implement Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,728+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor & Implement Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 12×32

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×32 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×32

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×32 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×32

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×32 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×32

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×32 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×32

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×32 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×32

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×32 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×32

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×32 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×32

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×32 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×32

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×32 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×32

Pool House / Cabana

12×32 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×32

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×32 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor & Implement Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to cost?

A 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $6,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $131/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to?

Almost always for 384+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $131/month on a 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×32 tractor & implement lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor & Implement Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel carport jet ski cover attached to yellow shed roof building near marina sailboats

12×32 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

384 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×32 steel building delivers 384 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with black trim and open roll-up in saguaro desert

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Single-Vehicle Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 single-vehicle garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick this footprint when they want enclosed parking for a.

You’re viewing:Single-Vehicle Garage·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-SINGLE-VEHICLE-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 single-vehicle garage.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 single-vehicle garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Single-Vehicle Garage layout.

Our 14×25 single-vehicle garage fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick this footprint when they want enclosed parking for a full-size pickup or SUV with real walking room down both sides. 14 feet clears an F-150 mirror-to-mirror with about 18 inches of breathing room each side, and the 24-foot length leaves 4-5 feet behind the tailgate for storage shelves.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Vehicle Garage works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Vehicle Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Vehicle Garage spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Vehicle Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-vehicle garage
Everyday single-vehicle garage
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-vehicle garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-vehicle garage + seasonal storage
single-vehicle garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 single-vehicle garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Vehicle Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Vehicle Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Vehicle Garage also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Vehicle Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 single-vehicle garage cost?

A 14×25 single-vehicle garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 single-vehicle garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-vehicle garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 single-vehicle garage?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-vehicle garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 single-vehicle garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 single-vehicle garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 single-vehicle garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 single-vehicle garage.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 single-vehicle garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 single-vehicle garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 single-vehicle garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 single-vehicle garage typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Vehicle Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with black trim and open roll-up in saguaro desert

14×25 Single-Vehicle Garage

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with green wainscoting, green roll-up door and white entry

14×25 Backyard Workshop

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Backyard Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Backyard Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 backyard workshop fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists building a dedicated woodworking or metal shop find 14×25 hits the.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation Ready
  • 30×30 Windows
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 backyard workshop.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 backyard workshop fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Backyard Workshop layout.

Our 14×25 backyard workshop fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists building a dedicated woodworking or metal shop find 14×25 hits the right balance: enough wall length for a 12-foot workbench plus tool storage, but small enough to skip commercial zoning in most counties. The taller 12-foot leg height accommodates dust collection ducting and overhead lighting.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Backyard Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop
Everyday backyard workshop
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop + seasonal storage
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Backyard Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Backyard Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 backyard workshop cost?

A 14×25 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 backyard workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 backyard workshop?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 backyard workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 backyard workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 backyard workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 backyard workshop.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 backyard workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 backyard workshop typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with green wainscoting, green roll-up door and white entry

14×25 Backyard Workshop

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy steel structure with black roll-up door and white entry door near a wooded lake

14×25 Storage Shed

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×25 storage shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Small property owners who’ve outgrown a 14×25 plastic shed step up to a 14×25 steel storage shed.

You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Finish
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 storage shed.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Looking for a 14×25 storage shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft shop

Storage Shed layout.

Looking for a 14×25 storage shed? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Small property owners who’ve outgrown a 14×25 plastic shed step up to a 14×25 steel storage shed to consolidate lawn equipment, seasonal gear, and household overflow. The 350 sq ft footprint holds a riding mower, two push mowers, a snowblower, and still leaves a back wall for shelving.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Shed works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday storage shed
Everyday storage shed
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage shed + seasonal storage
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Storage Shed, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 storage shed cost?

A 14×25 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 storage shed?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 storage shed typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy steel structure with black roll-up door and white entry door near a wooded lake

14×25 Storage Shed

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sand colored prefab metal building pool house with wood accent wall and french doors at evening

14×25 Pool House

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Pool House | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Pool House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Pool House, built for daily backyard use.

Our 14×25 pool house fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with backyard pools convert a 14×25 prefab building into a changing room.

You’re viewing:Pool House·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • Custom Color Match
  • French Doors
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-POOL-HOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 pool house.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Our 14×25 pool house fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft ADU

Pool House layout.

Our 14×25 pool house fits 14-foot widths and 25-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with backyard pools convert a 14×25 prefab building into a changing room, pump house, and covered patio combo. Split the interior with a partition wall: 10 feet of enclosed storage for chemicals and equipment, 14 feet of open lounge space facing the pool deck.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house
Everyday pool house
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house + seasonal storage
pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Pool House, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Home Office Studio

14×25 home office studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office Studio →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 pool house cost?

A 14×25 pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 pool house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 pool house?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 pool house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 pool house.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 pool house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 pool house typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sand colored prefab metal building pool house with wood accent wall and french doors at evening

14×25 Pool House

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal shed converted to backyard office studio with black trim and large windows

14×25 Home Office Studio

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

14×25 Home Office Studio | Steel and Stud, From $5,150

12

14×25 Home Office Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,850$5,150SAVE $700
or $107/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings14×25Home Office Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

14×25 Home Office Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 14×25 home office studio? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers and creatives use the 14×25 footprint as a detached home office or art studio.

You’re viewing:Home Office Studio·Size14×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,150$5,850Save $700
or as low as $107/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 14×25
14×24
smaller
$4,950
14×25
this size
$5,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 350 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 30×30 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-14X25-HOME-OFFICE-STUDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 14×25 home office studio.

14 feet wide × 25 feet long. Looking for a 14×25 home office studio? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE14′ × 25′ · 350 sq ft

Home Office Studio layout.

Looking for a 14×25 home office studio? At 350 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers and creatives use the 14×25 footprint as a detached home office or art studio away from the main house. The 14-foot width fits a full desk wall plus a small meeting area, and R-19 batt insulation with a vapor barrier turns the steel shell into year-round climate-controlled space.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office Studio works well at 14×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 14×25 Home Office Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
350 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 14×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office Studio spec sheet.

Width14′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space350 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office studio
Everyday home office studio
350 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office studio + seasonal storage
home office studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

14×25 Home Office Studio, what makes it different.

350sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$107/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 14×25 home office studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $107/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 14×25?

350 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 14′ × 25′ footprint with 350 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,800–$4,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 14×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 14×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 14×25 Home Office Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 14×25 Home Office Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
15×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,575+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office Studio also viewed:

🏡 14×25

Single-Vehicle Garage

14×25 single-vehicle garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Garage →

🏡 14×25

Backyard Workshop

14×25 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 14×25

Storage Shed

14×25 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 14×25

Pool House

14×25 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🌾 14×25

Tractor & Equipment Shed

14×25 tractor & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Equipment Shed →

🎯 14×25

Hunting Cabin Shell

14×25 hunting cabin shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →

🎯 14×25

Backyard Gym

14×25 backyard gym configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Gym →

🏡 14×25

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

14×25 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

🌾 14×25

She-Shed Garden Building

14×25 she-shed garden building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed Garden Building →

🏢 14×25

Small Business Shop

14×25 small business shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Shop →

🏡 14×25

Drive-Through Equipment Bay

14×25 drive-through equipment bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Drive-Through Equipment Bay →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 14×25 home office studio cost?

A 14×25 home office studio from Steel and Stud starts at $5,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $107/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 14×25 home office studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 14×25 home office studio?

Almost always for 350+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 14×25 home office studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 14×25 home office studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 14×25 home office studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $107/month on a 14×25 home office studio.

What warranty comes with the 14×25 home office studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 14×25 home office studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 14×25 home office studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 14×25 home office studio typically adds $2,800–$4,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal shed converted to backyard office studio with black trim and large windows

14×25 Home Office Studio

350 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

14′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 14×25 steel building delivers 350 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Need a custom size?

Order custom metal buildings in any width and length through Steel And Stud. Request metal building pricing or start your steel building design in 3D.

Instant Estimate

Commercial Metal Buildings Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Work With Steel And Stud

Your Commercial Metal Building Dealer and Steel Building Contractor

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial building contractor and metal building dealer. From metal building pricing and steel building design to professional steel building installation, we manage your entire project. One point of contact, one fixed price.

🏭

Clear-Span Steel Structures for Commercial Use

Column-free interiors from 30 to 100+ feet wide. Steel structures for commercial properties including warehouses, retail showrooms, truck bays, racking systems and open floor plans for any business application.

📑

Permit-Ready Engineered Plans

Every commercial building order includes state-specific stamped drawings and foundation calculations engineered to your local building code. Submit directly to your permit office.

🚀

Fast Project Completion

Most Steel And Stud commercial metal building projects go from order to operational in 4 to 12 weeks. On-site installation typically takes 1 to 5 days with our certified contractor crews.

🛡

Durable Commercial-Grade Steel

Galvanized steel framing with 20-year structural warranty on 12-gauge. Powder-coated panels in 17 colors resist rust, fire and termites. Built for decades of commercial use.

💰

Dealer-Direct Metal Building Pricing

As your dedicated Steel And Stud dealer, you get metal building pricing without middleman markups. Commercial building packages priced 30 to 50% below traditional metal building construction costs. Request pricing anytime.

🎯

Custom Steel Building Design Options

Choose any width and length to order custom metal buildings sized to your project. Add roll-up doors, walk-in entries, storefront windows, insulation, lean-tos, mezzanines and wainscot finishes. Complete steel building design flexibility from your Steel And Stud dealer.

Compare Commercial Building Packages

Standard vs Deluxe vs Custom Commercial Buildings

Steel And Stud offers three commercial building packages. Compare metal building pricing, included features and steel building design options below. Choose the right package, then request a quote from your Steel And Stud dealer.

 

Standard Commercial

Starting from $26,485 installed

Vertical roof and wall panels
14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel framing
Eave heights from 12 to 16 feet
Free delivery and professional installation included
Wainscot available as upgrade

Custom Commercial

Any size, quote-based

Any width and length based on project needs
Eave heights up to 24 feet, custom roof pitch
Red iron I-beam framing for wide clear spans
Lean-tos, mezzanines, dock access and custom layouts
Steel And Stud provides quotes within 24 hours
Customer Reviews

What Business Owners Say About Steel And Stud

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Commercial Metal Buildings.

★★★★★
4.8 / 5.0 from 2,847 verified reviews
★★★★★

"I needed a large, tall carport to protect my camping trailer in the Texas Panhandle. Bill was patient and very thorough. Three years later, after 80 mph winds collapsed it, Bill stayed in touch the whole way through the rebuild — even after warranty. No one is more customer-friendly."

RM
Ricardo M.
Phoenix, AZ
60x60x16 Commercial Building
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

DK
Diane K.
Charlotte, NC
40x100x14 Commercial Warehouse
★★★★☆

"Steel And Stud helped us plan and install a 50x50x16 Deluxe commercial building for our retail showroom. The wainscot and premium trim give it a professional look that impresses customers. Storefront windows and entry doors were pre-framed at the design stage so installation went smoothly. Looks like a project that cost twice what we paid."

TS
Trevor S.
Boise, ID
50x50x16 Deluxe Commercial Building
Frequently Asked Questions

Commercial Metal Building Buyer FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Steel And Stud commercial metal building pricing starts from $26,485 installed for a 36x40x14 Standard package. Mid-range options like the 40x100x14 warehouse start from $54,890. Deluxe commercial buildings with wainscot start from $36,825. All prices shown are starting estimates and may vary based on your location, building codes, customization and project specifications. Final pricing is provided in your written quote. Custom sizes in any width and length are available.

Yes. Steel And Stud provides commercial metal buildings in any custom width and length based on your project requirements. Widths range from 20 to over 100 feet. Lengths extend up to 300 feet. Eave heights are configurable from 12 to 24 feet. Choose from the pre-configured sizes on this page or share your custom dimensions and a Steel And Stud specialist will quote it within 24 hours.

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor. We partner with trusted production facilities to source pre-engineered steel buildings, then manage your entire project from planning and customization through delivery and professional steel building installation. This dealer-contractor approach gives you one point of contact from metal building pricing to completed metal building construction.

Yes. Steel And Stud is both a metal building dealer and a steel building contractor. Our certified crews handle professional steel building installation of commercial metal buildings across all 48 contiguous states. Most tubular steel buildings are installed in 1 to 5 days. Delivery and installation are included on standard orders.

Three ways to get metal building pricing and plan your project: (1) Submit a free quote request with your project details for a written commercial steel building quote within one business day. (2) Use the 3D building designer to configure steel building design options with live pricing. (3) Call 1-877-275-7048 to speak with a Steel And Stud dealer specialist.

Steel And Stud offers commercial metal buildings in any size. Pre-configured packages include 36x40, 40x50, 40x100, 50x50 and 60x60 in both Standard and Deluxe series. Custom sizes are available in any width from 20 to 100+ feet and any length up to 300 feet, with eave heights from 12 to 24 feet. There are no fixed size limitations. Tell us your project dimensions and we will price it.

Steel And Stud provides metal buildings for business use across every industry: metal warehouse buildings, commercial storage buildings, metal shop buildings for auto and truck repair, metal retail buildings, steel office buildings, metal workshop buildings for fabrication, metal garage buildings, industrial metal buildings for manufacturing, and steel structures for commercial properties including fitness centers, churches, restaurants, aviation hangars and agricultural operations. Any business that needs a durable commercial metal structure can work with Steel And Stud as their dealer and steel building contractor.

Standard Commercial Buildings feature vertical roof and wall panels with base trim, available with eave heights from 12 to 16 feet. Best for warehouses, workshops, storage and back-of-house operations. Deluxe Commercial Buildings include two-tone wainscot, premium trim, extended eave heights and pre-framed openings for storefront windows. Best for retail, office, restaurant, fitness and customer-facing commercial spaces. Both series are available in any custom size.

Yes. Steel And Stud offers three payment options for commercial metal building projects: Standard payment with deposit at order and balance after installation, monthly financing starting from $109/mo with terms from 12 to 84 months, and rent-to-own starting from $89/mo with no credit check required.

Most Steel And Stud commercial metal building projects are completed in 4 to 12 weeks from order to operational. On-site installation by our contractor crews typically takes 1 to 5 days for tubular steel structures. Larger red iron projects may take longer based on engineering and production requirements.

Yes. Every Steel And Stud commercial steel building is engineered to meet the specific snow, wind and seismic requirements for your installation location. Each order includes stamped engineered drawings and foundation calculations ready for permit submission. Steel And Stud handles engineering as part of our full-service metal building construction and commercial building contractor support.

Get Your Free Quote

Request Commercial Metal Building Pricing

Looking for a metal building dealer near me or a commercial building contractor near me? Steel And Stud serves all 48 states. Share your project details and our commercial building contractor team will return a written quote with metal building pricing within one business day.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Commercial Metal Buildings From Steel And Stud

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor working with business owners across all 48 contiguous states. We help you scope the project, source the right pre-engineered steel building, customize the layout, manage engineering and permitting, and complete professional installation through certified contractor crews. The result is a single accountable partner from your first conversation through the final walk-through, instead of a chain of separate vendors managing different parts of the same job.

Custom Commercial Steel Buildings in Any Width and Length

Every commercial metal building Steel And Stud delivers is sized to the project, not pulled from a fixed catalog. Widths run from roughly 20 feet on tubular framing to over 100 feet on red iron I-beam, with lengths reaching 300 feet and eave heights set anywhere from 12 to 24 feet. The pre-configured options on this page (36x40, 40x50, 40x100, 50x50, 60x60 and Deluxe variants) are popular starting points, but if your operation needs a 45x80 metal warehouse building, a 38x140 distribution center, or a 55x55 steel office building with a 20-foot eave for a mezzanine, that is the size you order. Sizing decisions follow your floor plan, racking layout, vehicle clearance, equipment height and zoning requirements, not a preset list.

Commercial Applications We Build For

Steel And Stud commercial steel buildings serve a wide cross-section of business types. Warehouse operators and 3PL providers use clear-span metal warehouse buildings to maximize racking capacity and forklift movement. Auto and truck repair shops select tall-eave steel shop buildings with multi-bay roll-up doors that clear two-post lifts and service trucks. Retailers, dealerships and showroom operators choose Deluxe commercial buildings with wainscot and storefront window openings to project a polished, customer-facing exterior. Light manufacturers, fabrication shops and contractor yards run their operations out of metal workshop buildings sized for welding tables, machine tools and equipment staging.

Beyond those core uses, churches and event venues install wide clear-span steel structures for sanctuaries and fellowship halls; fitness operators and indoor sports facilities use tall-eave commercial buildings for courts, CrossFit boxes and batting cages; agricultural businesses build packing sheds and farm-retail commercial space; aviation operators install steel hangars for general aviation aircraft and helicopters; and self-storage developers partition long commercial buildings into rentable units. Whatever your business does inside the building, the building is engineered around it.

How to Get Pricing and Start Your Project

The fastest path to accurate metal building pricing is a written quote. Submit your approximate dimensions, intended use and installation address through the free quote form and a Steel And Stud commercial building specialist returns a detailed written quote within one business day. The quote reflects your specific width and length, eave height, framing gauge, door and window selections, insulation package, finish choices and the snow, wind and seismic requirements at your installation location. There is no obligation, no pressure, and you are free to compare and adjust before placing the order.

If you prefer to explore configurations visually first, the 3D building designer lets you set dimensions, add doors and windows, change finishes and see live pricing as you adjust. Or call 1-877-275-7048 to reach a specialist directly. However you start, the goal is project-level numbers fast enough to move on real timelines.

Standard, Deluxe and Custom Building Packages

Steel And Stud delivers three commercial building package tiers. Standard Commercial Buildings are the workhorse choice for warehouses, workshops, contractor yards, mini-storage and back-of-house operations where function takes priority over facade. They include vertical roof and wall panels, galvanized steel framing in 14-gauge or 12-gauge, eave heights from 12 to 16 feet, free delivery and professional installation, with starting prices from $26,485 installed.

Deluxe Commercial Buildings are designed for customer-facing applications where exterior appearance matters: retail stores, restaurants, professional offices, fitness centers, auto dealerships and worship halls. The Deluxe package adds a two-tone wainscot exterior, premium gable and corner trim, extended eave heights up to 18 feet and pre-framed openings ready for storefront windows, additional doors and ADA-compliant entries. Starting prices begin at $36,825 installed.

Custom Commercial Buildings cover everything the Standard and Deluxe packages do not. Red iron I-beam clear spans up to 100 feet, eave heights above 18 feet, mezzanine levels, lean-tos on multiple sides, dock-leveler-ready loading bays, custom roof pitches and specialized door layouts are quoted individually based on your engineering and site requirements. There is no dimension or feature Steel And Stud cannot accommodate as a custom project.

Steel Building Design and Configuration Options

Customization happens at the design stage, before your building enters production, so installation runs without surprises. Door options span sectional roll-up garage doors from 8x8 up to 16x16 for vehicle bays and equipment access, commercial walk-in doors for daily foot traffic, and storefront entry systems with pre-framed openings for customer-facing builds. Window openings can be placed on any wall and sized to match retail visibility, office natural light or warehouse ventilation needs. Insulation runs from R-13 for moderate climate buffering up to R-30 for fully conditioned commercial interiors with HVAC.

Beyond doors, windows and insulation, you can add lean-to canopies on any side for covered loading or outdoor work, mezzanine levels to add usable square footage without expanding the footprint, interior partition walls for offices or partitioned storage, dock-height openings for trailer loading, and pre-engineered HVAC penetrations. Exterior color is selected from 17 panel options, applied independently across roof, walls, trim and (on Deluxe builds) wainscot, so the finished commercial steel building reflects your brand or fits the surrounding architecture.

Engineering, Permitting and Code Compliance

Every commercial metal building Steel And Stud delivers is engineered for the specific snow, wind and seismic loads at your installation address, with stamped drawings and foundation calculations included in every order ready for permit submission. Engineering is handled in-house as part of standard service, so there is no need to hire a separate structural engineer or coordinate stamps from multiple parties. The package covers what your local building department requires for commercial permits, including ground snow load, basic wind speed, exposure category and seismic risk category specific to your zip code.

Professional Installation by Certified Steel And Stud Contractor Crews

Once the permit is approved and your site is prepared, Steel And Stud contractor crews arrive to complete the steel building installation on your schedule. Most tubular steel commercial buildings reach a weather-tight, fully erected state in one to five days on site, depending on dimensions and configuration. Larger red iron I-beam projects with custom features run longer based on span width, mezzanine work and specialized openings. The typical timeline from order placement to a fully operational commercial metal building is four to twelve weeks, against four to nine months for stick-built or block construction of equivalent square footage. You pay your deposit at order and the balance after the completed walk-through.

Commercial Metal Building Pricing and What Drives Cost

Pricing on a commercial metal building moves with the build. Two structures with the same dimensions can quote very differently once you factor in framing gauge, eave height, the snow and wind loads at the site, door and window count, insulation depth, finish package, lean-to additions, mezzanine work and any custom engineering. A 36x40x14 with three roll-up doors, a walk-in entry, R-19 insulation and a 14-foot lean-to is a different building from a 36x40x14 in base configuration, even though the dimensions match. Your written quote from Steel And Stud reflects the building you are actually ordering, with starting prices serving as a baseline rather than a final number.

Financing, Rent-to-Own and Section 179

Three payment paths are available for every commercial metal building project. Standard payment splits the total into a deposit at order and the balance after installation, which delivers the lowest total cost. Monthly financing starts from $109 per month with terms from 12 to 84 months and a soft credit pull. Rent-to-own starts from $89 per month, requires no credit check, and transfers ownership at the end of a 24 to 60 month term. Business buyers may also qualify for Section 179 deductions, which can allow a full first-year deduction on qualifying commercial metal building purchases.

Service Coverage Across All 48 States

Steel And Stud delivers and installs commercial metal buildings throughout the lower 48. Coverage extends to every state, but each project is engineered and permitted around the codes, snow and wind loads, and inspection processes of your specific installation address. Business owners working with a metal building dealer near them or hiring a commercial building contractor in their state get the same Steel And Stud team and the same dealer-direct pricing, with a project specialist who knows the local permit office and matches the build to your jurisdiction.

Why Buyers Choose Steel And Stud

The dealer-contractor model condenses what would normally be three or four separate vendor relationships into one. Instead of negotiating with a manufacturer, contracting an erector, hiring a structural engineer and managing freight separately, you place a single order with Steel And Stud and receive an engineered, delivered, installed commercial steel building under one fixed quote. There is no general contractor markup added to the chain, no broker margin built into freight, and no finger-pointing between vendors when something needs adjusting. Steel And Stud has served commercial customers since 2004, holds an A+ BBB rating, and carries over 2,800 verified buyer reviews averaging 4.8 stars across project sizes from small workshops to multi-acre distribution facilities.

Start Your Commercial Steel Building Project Today

Ready to plan your project? Submit a free quote request, configure your build in the 3D designer, or call 1-877-275-7048. A Steel And Stud specialist will return your written commercial steel building quote within one business day, walk you through customization options, line up financing if needed, and schedule professional installation once the project is locked in.

Related Steel And Stud Building Categories

Outside of commercial metal buildings, Steel And Stud also operates as a dealer and contractor for residential and agricultural structures including steel garages, metal barns, metal carports, RV covers and barndominiums. Steel building materials such as purlins, girts, standing seam roofing and insulated metal panels are also available for self-build and material-only projects.

Buy Commercial Metal Buildings From Steel And Stud

Dealer-direct metal building pricing starting from $26,485 installed. All prices are starting estimates. Custom sizes in any width and length. Professional steel building installation by our commercial building contractor team across 48 states. Get a free quote or call your nearest Steel And Stud commercial building contractor to plan your project today.

View Cart